Simplifly ptrace_request_to_str's implementation...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
794e51c0 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
11e7fd74 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
11e7fd74 961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2012 Free
9fbcbd81 97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 377interface.
7ee314fa 378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
b039ef04
L
1027@item global
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1029the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1030of subsequently loaded libraries.
1031
cd6d6c15
NC
1032@item initfirst
1033This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1034It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1035before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1036the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1037the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1038objects.
1039
1040@item interpose
1041Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1042but the primary executable.
1043
5fa222e4
AM
1044@item lazy
1045When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1046dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1047the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1048Lazy binding is the default.
1049
cd6d6c15
NC
1050@item loadfltr
1051Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1052runtime.
1053
1054@item muldefs
1055Allows multiple definitions.
1056
1057@item nocombreloc
1058Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1059
1060@item nocopyreloc
1061Disables production of copy relocs.
1062
1063@item nodefaultlib
1064Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1065ignore any default library search paths.
1066
1067@item nodelete
1068Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1069
1070@item nodlopen
1071Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1072
1073@item nodump
1074Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1075
6aa29e7b
JJ
1076@item noexecstack
1077Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1078
1079@item norelro
1080Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1081
cd6d6c15
NC
1082@item now
1083When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1084dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1085when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1086deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1087first called.
1088
1089@item origin
1090Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1091
6aa29e7b
JJ
1092@item relro
1093Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1094
24718e3b
L
1095@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1096Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1097
1098@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1099Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1100
04c3a755
NS
1101@item stack-size=@var{value}
1102Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1103Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1104@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1105
cd6d6c15
NC
1106@end table
1107
ece2d90e 1108Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1109
1110@kindex -(
1111@cindex groups of archives
1112@item -( @var{archives} -)
1113@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1114The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1115either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1116
1117The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1118references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1119the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1120archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1121object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1122would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1123they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1124resolved.
1125
1126Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1127it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1128more archives.
1129
69da35b5
NC
1130@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1131@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1134Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1135recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1136and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1137the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1138behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1139so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1140restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1141
4a43e768
AM
1142@kindex --as-needed
1143@kindex --no-as-needed
1144@item --as-needed
1145@itemx --no-as-needed
1146This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1147on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1148the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1149on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1150needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1151emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1152from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1153DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1154undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1155@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1156
e56f61be
L
1157@kindex --add-needed
1158@kindex --no-add-needed
1159@item --add-needed
1160@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1161These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1162their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1163options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1164and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1165
252b5132
RH
1166@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1167@item -assert @var{keyword}
1168This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1169
1170@kindex -Bdynamic
1171@kindex -dy
1172@kindex -call_shared
1173@item -Bdynamic
1174@itemx -dy
1175@itemx -call_shared
1176Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1177for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1178default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1179for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1180multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1181@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1182
a1ab1d2a
UD
1183@kindex -Bgroup
1184@item -Bgroup
1185Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1186section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1187object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1188@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1189only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1190
252b5132
RH
1191@kindex -Bstatic
1192@kindex -dn
1193@kindex -non_shared
1194@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1195@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1196@itemx -dn
1197@itemx -non_shared
1198@itemx -static
1199Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1200platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1201variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1202may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1203library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1204option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1205option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1206shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1207references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1208libraries.
252b5132
RH
1209
1210@kindex -Bsymbolic
1211@item -Bsymbolic
1212When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1213definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1214for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1215within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1216platforms which support shared libraries.
1217
40b36307
L
1218@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1219@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1220When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1221symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1222This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1223libraries.
1224
55255dae
L
1225@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1226@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1227Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1228typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1229global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1230within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1231to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1232in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1233which support shared libraries.
1234
1235The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1236scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1237
40b36307
L
1238@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1239@item --dynamic-list-data
1240Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1241
1242@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1243@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1244Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1245is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1246
0b8a70d9
L
1247@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1248@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1249Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1250
252b5132
RH
1251@kindex --check-sections
1252@kindex --no-check-sections
1253@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1254@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1255Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1256been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1257perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1258suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1259allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1260restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1261Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1262force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1263option.
252b5132 1264
ddbb8a31
NC
1265@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1266@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1267@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1269This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1270by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1271command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1272output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1273input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1274specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1275follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1276behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1277
1278This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1279libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1280mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1281their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1282required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1283the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1284dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1285symbols.
1286
252b5132
RH
1287@cindex cross reference table
1288@kindex --cref
1289@item --cref
1290Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1291generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1292Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1293
1294The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1295easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1296sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1297symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1298definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1299
4818e05f
AM
1300@cindex common allocation
1301@kindex --no-define-common
1302@item --no-define-common
1303This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1304The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1305@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1306
1307The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1308the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1309of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1310forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1311Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1312from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1313This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1314and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1315duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1316paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1317
252b5132 1318@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1319@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1320@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1321Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1322address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1323times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1324limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1325context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1326symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1327constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1328using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1329Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1330space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1331@var{expression}.
1332
1333@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1334@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1335@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1336@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1337@itemx --no-demangle
1338These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1339and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1340present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1341underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1342mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1343different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1344to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1345demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1346is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1347
1348@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1349@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1350@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1351@item -I@var{file}
1352@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1353Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1354generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1355linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1356doing.
1357
7ce691ae 1358@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1359@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1360@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1361@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1362Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1363with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1364
252b5132
RH
1365@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1366@item --force-exe-suffix
1367Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1368
1369If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1370@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1371the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1372option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1373Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1374it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1375
1376@kindex --gc-sections
1377@kindex --no-gc-sections
1378@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1379@item --gc-sections
1380@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1381Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1382targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1383performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1384@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1385
d5465ba2
AM
1386@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1387examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1388symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1389command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1390referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1391libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1392referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1393the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1394relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1395
ac69cbc6 1396This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1397@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1398specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1399a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1400
c17d87de
NC
1401@kindex --print-gc-sections
1402@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1403@cindex garbage collection
1404@item --print-gc-sections
1405@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1406List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1407printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1408collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1409default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1410be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1411line.
1412
30824704
RM
1413@kindex --print-output-format
1414@cindex output format
1415@item --print-output-format
1416Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1417other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1418in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1419
252b5132
RH
1420@cindex help
1421@cindex usage
1422@kindex --help
1423@item --help
1424Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1425
ea20a7da
CC
1426@kindex --target-help
1427@item --target-help
1428Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1429
2509a395
SL
1430@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1431@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1432Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1433@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1434
1435@cindex memory usage
1436@kindex --no-keep-memory
1437@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1438@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1439symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1440instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1441necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1442while linking a large executable.
1443
1444@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1445@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1446@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1447@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1448Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1449is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1450The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1451behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1452libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1453
aa713662
L
1454@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1455@kindex -z muldefs
1456@item --allow-multiple-definition
1457@itemx -z muldefs
1458Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1459report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1460first definition will be used.
1461
b79e8c78 1462@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1463@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1464@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1465@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1466Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1467This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1468determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1469shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1470how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1471
903249d7
NC
1472The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1473referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1474an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1475a shared library.
1476
1477The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1478libraries specified at link time are that:
1479
1480@itemize @bullet
1481@item
1482A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1483that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1484resolvable at load time.
1485@item
1486There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1487symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1488
1489The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1490select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1491architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1492appropriate memset function.
1493@end itemize
b79e8c78 1494
31941635
L
1495@kindex --no-undefined-version
1496@item --no-undefined-version
1497Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1498it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1499will be issued instead.
1500
3e3b46e5
PB
1501@kindex --default-symver
1502@item --default-symver
1503Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1504exported symbols.
1505
1506@kindex --default-imported-symver
1507@item --default-imported-symver
1508Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1509imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1512@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1513Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1514files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1515been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1516This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1517errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1518have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1519inappropriate.
1520
fe7929ce
AM
1521@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1522@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1523Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1524library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1525
252b5132
RH
1526@kindex --no-whole-archive
1527@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1528Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1529archive files.
1530
1531@cindex output file after errors
1532@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1533@item --noinhibit-exec
1534Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1535Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1536errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1537when it issues any error whatsoever.
1538
0a9c1c8e
CD
1539@kindex -nostdlib
1540@item -nostdlib
1541Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1542command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1543(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1544
252b5132 1545@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1546@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1547@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1548@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1549file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1550@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1551object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1552object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1553should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1554usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1555name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1556list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1557command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1558this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1559@end ifclear
1560
36af4a4e
JJ
1561@kindex -pie
1562@kindex --pic-executable
1563@item -pie
1564@itemx --pic-executable
1565@cindex position independent executables
1566Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1567ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1568libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1569address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1570normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1571defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1572
252b5132
RH
1573@kindex -qmagic
1574@item -qmagic
1575This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1576
1577@kindex -Qy
1578@item -Qy
1579This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1580
1581@kindex --relax
1582@cindex synthesizing linker
1583@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1584@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1585@item --relax
28d5f677 1586@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1587An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1588@ifset GENERIC
1589This option is only supported on a few targets.
1590@end ifset
1591@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1592@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1593@end ifset
1594@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1595@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1596@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1597@ifset XTENSA
1598@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1599@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1600@ifset M68HC11
1601@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1602@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1603@ifset POWERPC
1604@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1605@end ifset
252b5132 1606
28d5f677
NC
1607On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1608global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1609addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1610synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1611instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1612
1613On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1614debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1615@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1616This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1617family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1618@end ifset
1619
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1622but ignored.
1623@end ifset
1624
28d5f677
NC
1625On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1626@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1627
252b5132
RH
1628@cindex retaining specified symbols
1629@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1630@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1631@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1632@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1633Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1634discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1635symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1636@ifset GENERIC
1637(such as VxWorks)
1638@end ifset
1639where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1640run-time memory.
1641
1642@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1643or symbols needed for relocations.
1644
1645You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1646line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1647
1648@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1649@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1650@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1651@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1652Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1653linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1654arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1655them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1656also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1657objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1658@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1659ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1660@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1661
ff5dcc92 1662The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1663SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1664@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1665runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1666options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1667gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1668file systems.
252b5132 1669
ff5dcc92 1670For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1671followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1672the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1673@end ifset
1674
1675@ifset GENERIC
1676@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1677@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1678@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1679When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1680happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1681of the input files.
1682
1683When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1684non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1685shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1686explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1687specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1688@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1689either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1690appearing multiple times.
1691
28c309a2
NC
1692This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1693that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1694is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1695runtime linker would do.
1696
252b5132 1697The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1698libraries:
252b5132
RH
1699@enumerate
1700@item
ff5dcc92 1701Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1702@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1703Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1704between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1705specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1706used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1707at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1708by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1709the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1710@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1711On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1712@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1713environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1714@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1715On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1716directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1717@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1718For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1719variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1720@item
ec4eb78a
L
1721For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1722@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1723libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1724@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1725@item
252b5132
RH
1726The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1727@item
1728For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1729exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1730@end enumerate
1731
1732If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1733warning and continue with the link.
1734@end ifset
1735
1736@kindex -shared
1737@kindex -Bshareable
1738@item -shared
1739@itemx -Bshareable
1740@cindex shared libraries
1741Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1742and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1743shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1744undefined symbols in the link.
1745
252b5132 1746@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1747@item --sort-common
1748@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1749@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1750This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1751ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1752sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1753eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1754between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1755specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1756
2509a395
SL
1757@kindex --sort-section=name
1758@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1759This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1760patterns in the linker script.
1761
2509a395
SL
1762@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1763@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1764This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1765patterns in the linker script.
1766
252b5132 1767@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1768@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1769Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1770each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1771size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1772
1773@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1774@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1775Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1776output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1777This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1778certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1779cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1780that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1781support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1782input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1783more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1784many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1785
1786@kindex --stats
1787@item --stats
1788Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1789as execution time and memory usage.
1790
2509a395 1791@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1792@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1793Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1794configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1795that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1796
252b5132
RH
1797@kindex --traditional-format
1798@cindex traditional format
1799@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1800For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1801the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1802use the traditional format instead.
1803
1804@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1805For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1806symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1807full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1808@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1809trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1810combine duplicate entries.
1811
2509a395
SL
1812@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1813@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1814Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1815address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1816times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1817line.
1818@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1819for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1820@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1821should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1822sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1823
2509a395
SL
1824@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1825@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1826@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1827@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1828@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1829@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1830@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1831Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1832@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1833
2509a395
SL
1834@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1835@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1836@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1837When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1838of the first byte of the text segment.
1839
9d5777a3
RM
1840@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1841@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1842@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1843When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1844the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1845text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1846
560e09e9
NC
1847@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1848@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1849Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1850values for @samp{method}:
1851
1852@table @samp
1853@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1854Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1855
1856@item report-all
da8bce14 1857Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1858
1859@item ignore-in-object-files
1860Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1861ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1862
1863@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1864Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1865ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1866when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1867libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1868command line.
1869@end table
1870
1871The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1872by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1873
1874Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1875unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1876can change this to a warning.
1877
1715a13c
L
1878@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1879@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1880@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1881@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1882Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1883supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1884the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1885argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1886
1887@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1888@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1889@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1890Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1891used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1892about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1893is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1894see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1895use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1896symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1897@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1898
7ce691ae 1899@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1900@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1901@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1902@item --warn-common
1903Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1904a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1905but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1906you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1907Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1908warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1909
1910There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1911
1912@table @samp
1913@item int i = 1;
1914A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1915file.
1916
1917@item extern int i;
1918An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1919There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1920variable somewhere.
1921
1922@item int i;
1923A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1924variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1925The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1926single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1927size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1928a definition of the same variable.
1929@end table
1930
1931The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1932Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1933just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1934encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1935a common symbol.
1936
1937@enumerate
1938@item
1939Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1940definition for the symbol.
1941@smallexample
1942@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1943 overridden by definition
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1945@end smallexample
1946
1947@item
1948Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1949the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1950except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1951@smallexample
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overriding common
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1955@end smallexample
1956
1957@item
1958Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1959@smallexample
1960@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1961 of `@var{symbol}'
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1963@end smallexample
1964
1965@item
1966Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1967@smallexample
1968@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1969 overridden by larger common
1970@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1971@end smallexample
1972
1973@item
1974Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1975the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1976encountered in a different order.
1977@smallexample
1978@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1979 overriding smaller common
1980@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1981@end smallexample
1982@end enumerate
1983
1984@kindex --warn-constructors
1985@item --warn-constructors
1986Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1987object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1988detect the use of global constructors.
1989
1990@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1991@item --warn-multiple-gp
1992Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1993This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1994Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1995section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1996of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1997base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1998base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1999bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2000large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2001values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2002option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2003
2004@kindex --warn-once
2005@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2006@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2007@item --warn-once
2008Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2009which refers to it.
2010
2011@kindex --warn-section-align
2012@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2013@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2014@item --warn-section-align
2015Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2016alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2017The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2018is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2019the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2020
8fdd7217
NC
2021@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2022@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2023Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2024
a0c402a5
L
2025@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2026@item --warn-alternate-em
2027Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2028
560e09e9
NC
2029@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2030@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2031If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2032@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2033This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2034
2035@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2036@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2037This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2038it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2039
252b5132
RH
2040@kindex --whole-archive
2041@cindex including an entire archive
2042@item --whole-archive
2043For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2044@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2045in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2046files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2047library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2048library. This option may be used more than once.
2049
7ec229ce 2050Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2051about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2052Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2053list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2054your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2055
2509a395
SL
2056@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2057@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2058Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2059@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2060undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2061@var{symbol}.
2062
2063This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2064wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2065wishes to call the system function, it should call
2066@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2067
2068Here is a trivial example:
2069
2070@smallexample
2071void *
cc2f008e 2072__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2073@{
cc2f008e 2074 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2075 return __real_malloc (c);
2076@}
2077@end smallexample
2078
ff5dcc92 2079If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2080all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2081instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2082call the real @code{malloc} function.
2083
2084You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2085links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2086you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2087file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2088call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2089
6aa29e7b
JJ
2090@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2091@item --eh-frame-hdr
2092Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2093@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2094
e41b3a13
JJ
2095@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2096@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2097Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2098generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2099if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2100
6c1439be
L
2101@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2102@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2103@item --enable-new-dtags
2104@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2105This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2106systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2107@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2108If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2109created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2110those options are only available for ELF systems.
2111
2d643429 2112@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2113@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2114Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2115close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2116time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2117increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2118value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2119
fdc90cb4
JJ
2120@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2121@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2122Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2123@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2124new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2125the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2126hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2127
35835446
JR
2128@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2129@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2130This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2131linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2132for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2133about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2134
4f9c04f7 2135Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21361021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2137run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2138has been used.
2139
2140The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2141enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2142
c0065db7
RM
2143@kindex --build-id
2144@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2145@item --build-id
2146@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2147Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2148The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2149file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2150@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2151parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2152@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2153@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2154an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2155characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2156omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2157
2158The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2159that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2160unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2161to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2162file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2163string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2164
2165Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2166@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2167@end table
2168
0285c67d
NC
2169@c man end
2170
36f63dca 2171@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2172
0285c67d
NC
2173@c man begin OPTIONS
2174
ff5dcc92 2175The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2176the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2177normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2178use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2179@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2180like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2181symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2182object file).
2183
2184In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2185support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2186PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2187values by either a space or an equals sign.
2188
ff5dcc92 2189@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2190
2191@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2192@item --add-stdcall-alias
2193If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2194as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2195[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2196
2197@kindex --base-file
2198@item --base-file @var{file}
2199Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2200addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2201@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2202[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2203
2204@kindex --dll
2205@item --dll
2206Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2207@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2208file.
bb10df36 2209[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2210
88183869
DK
2211@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2212@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2213@item --enable-long-section-names
2214@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2215The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2216the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2217for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2218fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2219to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2220allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2221disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2222generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2223as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2224with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2225GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2226information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2227option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2228section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2229when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2230image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2231[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2232
252b5132
RH
2233@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2234@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2235@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2236@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2237If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2238do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2239only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2240resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2241undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2242@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2243to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2244warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2245import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2246to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2247feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2248@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2249mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2250[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2251
522f09cd
KT
2252@kindex --leading-underscore
2253@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2254@item --leading-underscore
2255@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2256For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2257in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2258disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2259
252b5132
RH
2260@cindex DLLs, creating
2261@kindex --export-all-symbols
2262@item --export-all-symbols
2263If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2264be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2265otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2266explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2267attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2268option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2269@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2270@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2271exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2272re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2273such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2274@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2275@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2276Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2277not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2278extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2279(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2280These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2281@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2282@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2283@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2284@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2285[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2286
2287@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2288@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2289Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2290exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2291[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2292
2927aaca
NC
2293@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2294@item --exclude-all-symbols
2295Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2297
252b5132
RH
2298@kindex --file-alignment
2299@item --file-alignment
2300Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2301file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2302512.
bb10df36 2303[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2304
2305@cindex heap size
2306@kindex --heap
2307@item --heap @var{reserve}
2308@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2309Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2310to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2311committed.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@cindex image base
2315@kindex --image-base
2316@item --image-base @var{value}
2317Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2318the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2319is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2320your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2321other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2322for dlls.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@kindex --kill-at
2326@item --kill-at
2327If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2328symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2329[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2330
26d2d8a2
BF
2331@kindex --large-address-aware
2332@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2333If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2334header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2335greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2336or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2337section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2338[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2339
252b5132
RH
2340@kindex --major-image-version
2341@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2342Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2343[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2344
2345@kindex --major-os-version
2346@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2347Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2349
2350@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2351@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2352Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2353[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2354
2355@kindex --minor-image-version
2356@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2357Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2358[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2359
2360@kindex --minor-os-version
2361@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2362Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2363[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2364
2365@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2366@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2367Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2369
2370@cindex DEF files, creating
2371@cindex DLLs, creating
2372@kindex --output-def
2373@item --output-def @var{file}
2374The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2375file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2376(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2377library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2378automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2379[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2380
b044cda1
CW
2381@cindex DLLs, creating
2382@kindex --out-implib
2383@item --out-implib @var{file}
2384The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2385import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2386import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2387may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2388makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2389creation step.
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2391
2392@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2393@item --enable-auto-image-base
2394Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2395using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2396from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2397collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2398avoided.
bb10df36 2399[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2400
2401@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2402@item --disable-auto-image-base
2403Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2404user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2405default.
bb10df36 2406[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2407
2408@cindex DLLs, linking to
2409@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2410@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2411When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2412search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2413@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2414between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2415uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2416@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2417[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2418
2419@kindex --enable-auto-import
2420@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2421Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2422DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2423building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2424'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2425to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2426specification published by Microsoft.
2427
e2a83dd0
NC
2428Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2429data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2430placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2431around a problem with consts that is described here:
2432http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2433
4d8907ac
DS
2434Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2435see this message:
0d888aac 2436
ece2d90e 2437"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2438documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2439
ece2d90e
NC
2440This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2441ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2442allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2443fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2444constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2445multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2446this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2447of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2448the warning, and exit.
2449
2450There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2451data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2452
2fa9fc65
NC
2453One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2454of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2455this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2456
c0065db7
RM
2457A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2458that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2459there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2460a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2461
2462@example
2463extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2464extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2465 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2466@end example
2467
2468or
2469
2470@example
2471extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2472extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2473 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2474@end example
2475
c0065db7 2476For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2477is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2478
2479@example
2480extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2481extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2482 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2483@end example
2484
c406afaf
NC
2485or
2486
2487@example
2488extern long long extern_ll;
2489extern_ll -->
2490 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2491@end example
2492
2fa9fc65 2493A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2494'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2495@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2496requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2497building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2498merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2499between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2500constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2501
2502Original:
2503@example
2504--foo.h
2505extern int arr[];
2506--foo.c
2507#include "foo.h"
2508void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2509 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2510@}
2511@end example
2512
2513Solution 1:
2514@example
2515--foo.h
2516extern int arr[];
2517--foo.c
2518#include "foo.h"
2519void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2520 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2521 volatile int *parr = arr;
2522 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2523@}
2524@end example
2525
2526Solution 2:
2527@example
2528--foo.h
2529/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2530#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2531 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2532#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2533#else
2534#define FOO_IMPORT
2535#endif
2536extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2537--foo.c
2538#include "foo.h"
2539void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2540 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2541@}
2542@end example
2543
c0065db7 2544A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2545library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2546for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2547functions).
bb10df36 2548[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2549
2550@kindex --disable-auto-import
2551@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2552Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2553@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2554[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2555
2fa9fc65
NC
2556@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2557@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2558If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2559that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2560a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2561environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2563
2564@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2565@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2566Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2567DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2569
b044cda1
CW
2570@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2571@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2572Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2574
252b5132
RH
2575@kindex --section-alignment
2576@item --section-alignment
2577Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2578addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2580
2581@cindex stack size
2582@kindex --stack
2583@item --stack @var{reserve}
2584@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2585Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2586to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2587committed.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2589
2590@kindex --subsystem
2591@item --subsystem @var{which}
2592@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2593@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2594Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2595legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2596@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2597the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2598@var{which}.
bb10df36 2599[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2600
2f563b51
DK
2601The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2602of the PE file header:
2603[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2604
2605@kindex --dynamicbase
2606@item --dynamicbase
2607The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2608randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2609Vista for i386 PE targets.
2610
2611@kindex --forceinteg
2612@item --forceinteg
2613Code integrity checks are enforced.
2614
2615@kindex --nxcompat
2616@item --nxcompat
2617The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2618This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2619
2620@kindex --no-isolation
2621@item --no-isolation
2622Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2623
2624@kindex --no-seh
2625@item --no-seh
2626The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2627this image.
2628
2629@kindex --no-bind
2630@item --no-bind
2631Do not bind this image.
2632
2633@kindex --wdmdriver
2634@item --wdmdriver
2635The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2636
2f563b51
DK
2637@kindex --tsaware
2638@item --tsaware
2639The image is Terminal Server aware.
2640
252b5132
RH
2641@end table
2642
0285c67d
NC
2643@c man end
2644
ac145307
BS
2645@ifset C6X
2646@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2647
2648@c man begin OPTIONS
2649
2650The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2651libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2652all executables use an index of 0.
2653
2654@table @gcctabopt
2655
2656@kindex --dsbt-size
2657@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2658This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2659or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2660entries.
2661
2662@kindex --dsbt-index
2663@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2664This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2665to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2666executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2667@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2668
fbd9ad90
PB
2669@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2670The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2671exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2672
ac145307
BS
2673@end table
2674
2675@c man end
2676@end ifset
2677
93fd0973
SC
2678@ifset M68HC11
2679@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2680
2681@c man begin OPTIONS
2682
2683The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2684memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2685
2686@table @gcctabopt
2687
2688@kindex --no-trampoline
2689@item --no-trampoline
2690This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2691is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2692instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2693
2694@kindex --bank-window
2695@item --bank-window @var{name}
2696This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2697the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2698The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2699paging and addresses within the memory window.
2700
2701@end table
2702
2703@c man end
2704@end ifset
2705
7fb9f789
NC
2706@ifset M68K
2707@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2708
2709@c man begin OPTIONS
2710
2711The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2712when linking for 68K targets.
2713
2714@table @gcctabopt
2715
2716@kindex --got
2717@item --got=@var{type}
2718This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2719@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2720@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2721Info entry for @file{ld}.
2722
2723@end table
2724
2725@c man end
2726@end ifset
2727
252b5132
RH
2728@ifset UsesEnvVars
2729@node Environment
2730@section Environment Variables
2731
0285c67d
NC
2732@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2733
560e09e9 2734You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2735@ifclear SingleFormat
2736@code{GNUTARGET},
2737@end ifclear
2738@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2739
36f63dca 2740@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2741@kindex GNUTARGET
2742@cindex default input format
2743@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2744use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2745of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2746@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2747of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2748attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2749this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2750there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2751object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2752BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2753in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2754@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2755
2756@kindex LDEMULATION
2757@cindex default emulation
2758@cindex emulation, default
2759@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2760@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2761behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2762available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2763the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2764variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2765linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2766
2767@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2768@cindex demangling, default
2769Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2770@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2771default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2772a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2773may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2774options.
2775
0285c67d
NC
2776@c man end
2777@end ifset
2778
252b5132
RH
2779@node Scripts
2780@chapter Linker Scripts
2781
2782@cindex scripts
2783@cindex linker scripts
2784@cindex command files
2785Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2786written in the linker command language.
2787
2788The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2789the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2790the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2791more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2792direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2793described below.
2794
2795The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2796yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2797linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2798to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2799such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2800
2801You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2802line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2803default linker script.
2804
2805You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2806to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2807Linker Scripts}.
2808
2809@menu
2810* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2811* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2812* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2813* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2814* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2815* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2816* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2817* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2818* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2819* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2820* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2821@end menu
2822
2823@node Basic Script Concepts
2824@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2825@cindex linker script concepts
2826We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2827describe the linker script language.
2828
2829The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2830file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2831@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2832The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2833purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2834among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2835section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2836in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2837
2838Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2839also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2840contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2841the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2842A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2843area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2844loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2845which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2846of debugging information.
2847
2848Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2849first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2850the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2851@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2852section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2853same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2854is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2855(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2856based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2857RAM address would be the VMA.
2858
2859You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2860program with the @samp{-h} option.
2861
2862Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2863@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2864has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2865information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2866will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2867static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2868referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2869
2870You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2871program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2872option.
2873
2874@node Script Format
2875@section Linker Script Format
2876@cindex linker script format
2877Linker scripts are text files.
2878
2879You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2880either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2881symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2882generally ignored.
2883
2884Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2885If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2886otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2887double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2888file name.
2889
2890You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2891@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2892to whitespace.
2893
2894@node Simple Example
2895@section Simple Linker Script Example
2896@cindex linker script example
2897@cindex example of linker script
2898Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2899
2900The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2901@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2902memory layout of the output file.
2903
2904The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2905describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2906code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2907@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2908Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2909your input files.
2910
2911For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29120x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2913linker script which will do that:
2914@smallexample
2915SECTIONS
2916@{
2917 . = 0x10000;
2918 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2919 . = 0x8000000;
2920 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2921 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2922@}
2923@end smallexample
2924
2925You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2926followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2927descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2928
252b5132
RH
2929The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2930sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2931counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2932other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2933current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2934incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2935@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2936
2937The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2938required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2939after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2940which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2941wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2942means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2943
2944Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2945@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2946@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2947
2948The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2949the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2950at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2951output section, the value of the location counter will be
2952@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2953effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2954immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2955
2956The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2957alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2958example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2959sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2960may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2961sections.
2962
2963That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2964
2965@node Simple Commands
2966@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2967@cindex linker script simple commands
2968In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2969
2970@menu
2971* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2972* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2973@ifclear SingleFormat
2974* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2975@end ifclear
2976
4a93e180 2977* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2978* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2979@end menu
2980
2981@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2982@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2983@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2984@cindex start of execution
2985@cindex first instruction
2986@cindex entry point
2987The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2988point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2989entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2990@smallexample
2991ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2992@end smallexample
2993
2994There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2995entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2996stopping when one of them succeeds:
2997@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2998@item
252b5132 2999the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3000@item
252b5132 3001the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3002@item
3ab904c4
NC
3003the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3004targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3005check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3006@item
252b5132 3007the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3008@item
252b5132
RH
3009The address @code{0}.
3010@end itemize
3011
3012@node File Commands
36f63dca 3013@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3014@cindex linker script file commands
3015Several linker script commands deal with files.
3016
3017@table @code
3018@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3019@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3020@cindex including a linker script
3021Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3022be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3023with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
302410 levels deep.
3025
4006703d
NS
3026You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3027@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3028
252b5132
RH
3029@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3030@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3031@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3032@cindex input files in linker scripts
3033@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3034@cindex linker script input object files
3035The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3036in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3037
3038For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3039a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3040then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3041
3042In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3043script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3044
e3f2db7f
AO
3045In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3046with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3047located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3048for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3049open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3050linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3051description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3052
ff5dcc92 3053If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3054name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3055@samp{-l}.
3056
3057When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3058files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3059script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3060
3061@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3062@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3063@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3064@cindex grouping input files
3065The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3066files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3067new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3068in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3069
b717d30e
JJ
3070@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3071@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3072@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3073This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3074commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3075as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3076with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3077when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3078@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3079and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3080setting afterwards.
3081
252b5132
RH
3082@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3083@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3084@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3085The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3086@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3087@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3088Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3089precedence.
3090
3091You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3092output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3093
3094@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3095@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3096@cindex library search path in linker script
3097@cindex archive search path in linker script
3098@cindex search path in linker script
3099The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3100@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3101@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3102on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3103are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3104the command line option are searched first.
3105
3106@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3107@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3108@cindex first input file
3109The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3110that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3111though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3112when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3113first file.
3114@end table
3115
3116@ifclear SingleFormat
3117@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3118@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3119A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3120
3121@table @code
3122@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3123@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3124@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3125@cindex output file format in linker script
3126The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3127output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3128exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3129(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3130line option takes precedence.
3131
3132You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3133formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3134This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3135desired endianness.
3136
3137If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3138will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3139output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3140used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3141
3142For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3143command:
3144@smallexample
3145OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3146@end smallexample
3147This says that the default format for the output file is
3148@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3149option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3150format.
3151
3152@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3153@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3154@cindex input file format in linker script
3155The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3156files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3157This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3158(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3159is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3160command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3161@end table
3162@end ifclear
3163
4a93e180
NC
3164@node REGION_ALIAS
3165@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3166@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3167@cindex region alias
3168@cindex region names
3169
3170Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3171@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3172
3173@smallexample
3174REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3175@end smallexample
3176
3177The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3178memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3179to memory regions. An example follows.
3180
3181Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3182memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3183that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3184non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3185access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3186read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3187sections:
3188
3189@itemize @bullet
3190@item
3191@code{.text} program code;
3192@item
3193@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3194@item
3195@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3196@item
3197@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3198@end itemize
3199
3200The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3201part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3202output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3203systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3204@code{C}:
3205@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3206@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3207@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3208@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3209@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3210@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3211@end multitable
3212The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3213loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3214the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3215the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3216
3217The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3218includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3219memory layout:
3220@smallexample
3221INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3222
3223SECTIONS
3224 @{
3225 .text :
3226 @{
3227 *(.text)
3228 @} > REGION_TEXT
3229 .rodata :
3230 @{
3231 *(.rodata)
3232 rodata_end = .;
3233 @} > REGION_RODATA
3234 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3235 @{
3236 data_start = .;
3237 *(.data)
3238 @} > REGION_DATA
3239 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3240 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3241 .bss :
3242 @{
3243 *(.bss)
3244 @} > REGION_BSS
3245 @}
3246@end smallexample
3247
3248Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3249regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3250variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3251@table @code
3252@item A
3253Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3254@smallexample
3255MEMORY
3256 @{
3257 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3258 @}
3259
3260REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3261REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3262REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3263REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3264@end smallexample
3265@item B
3266Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3267into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3268@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3269@smallexample
3270MEMORY
3271 @{
3272 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3273 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3274 @}
3275
3276REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3277REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3278REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3279REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3280@end smallexample
3281@item C
3282Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3283@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3284initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3285system start into the @code{RAM}.
3286@smallexample
3287MEMORY
3288 @{
3289 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3290 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3291 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3292 @}
3293
3294REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3295REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3296REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3297REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3298@end smallexample
3299@end table
3300
3301It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3302@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3303necessary:
3304@smallexample
3305#include <string.h>
3306
3307extern char data_start [];
3308extern char data_size [];
3309extern char data_load_start [];
3310
3311void copy_data(void)
3312@{
3313 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3314 @{
3315 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3316 @}
3317@}
3318@end smallexample
3319
252b5132 3320@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3321@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3322There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3323
3324@table @code
3325@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3326@kindex ASSERT
3327@cindex assertion in linker script
3328Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3329with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3330
3331@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3332@kindex EXTERN
3333@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3334Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3335symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3336modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3337each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3338command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3339
3340@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3341@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3342@cindex common allocation in linker script
3343This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3344to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3345output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3346
4818e05f
AM
3347@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3348@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3349@cindex common allocation in linker script
3350This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3351command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3352to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3353
53d25da6
AM
3354@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3355@kindex INSERT
3356@cindex insert user script into default script
3357This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3358augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3359inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3360@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3361default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3362sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3363linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3364insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3365linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3366default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3367of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3368to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3369is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3370
3371@smallexample
3372SECTIONS
3373@{
3374 OVERLAY :
3375 @{
3376 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3377 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3378 @}
3379@}
3380INSERT AFTER .text;
3381@end smallexample
3382
252b5132
RH
3383@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3384@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3385@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3386This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3387references among certain output sections.
3388
3389In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3390using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3391will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3392errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3393a function defined in the other section.
3394
3395The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3396@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3397an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3398@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3399names.
3400
3401@ifclear SingleFormat
3402@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3403@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3404@cindex machine architecture
3405@cindex architecture
3406Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3407of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3408architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3409the @samp{-f} option.
3410@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3411
3412@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3413@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3414This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3415@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3416in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3417@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3418@end table
3419
3420@node Assignments
3421@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3422@cindex assignment in scripts
3423@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3424@cindex variables, defining
3425You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3426the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3427
3428@menu
3429* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3430* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3431* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3432* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3433* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3434@end menu
3435
3436@node Simple Assignments
3437@subsection Simple Assignments
3438
3439You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3440
3441@table @code
3442@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3443@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3444@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3445@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3446@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3447@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3448@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3449@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3450@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3451@end table
3452
3453The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3454@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3455defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3456
3457The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3458may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3459
3460The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3461
3462Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3463
3464You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3465statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3466section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3467
3468The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3469expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3470
3471Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3472assignments may be used:
3473
3474@smallexample
3475floating_point = 0;
3476SECTIONS
3477@{
3478 .text :
3479 @{
3480 *(.text)
3481 _etext = .;
3482 @}
156e34dd 3483 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3484 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3485@}
3486@end smallexample
3487@noindent
3488In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3489zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3490the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3491defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3492upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3493
eb8476a6
MR
3494@node HIDDEN
3495@subsection HIDDEN
3496@cindex HIDDEN
3497For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3498exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3499
3500Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3501@code{HIDDEN}:
3502
3503@smallexample
3504HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3505SECTIONS
3506@{
3507 .text :
3508 @{
3509 *(.text)
3510 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3511 @}
3512 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3513 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3514@}
3515@end smallexample
3516@noindent
3517In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3518
252b5132
RH
3519@node PROVIDE
3520@subsection PROVIDE
3521@cindex PROVIDE
3522In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3523only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3524the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3525@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3526@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3527@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3528@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3529@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3530
3531Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3532@smallexample
3533SECTIONS
3534@{
3535 .text :
3536 @{
3537 *(.text)
3538 _etext = .;
3539 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3540 @}
3541@}
3542@end smallexample
3543
3544In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3545underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3546the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3547underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3548If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3549linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3550
7af8e998
L
3551@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3552@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3553@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3554Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3555hidden and won't be exported.
3556
73ae6183
NC
3557@node Source Code Reference
3558@subsection Source Code Reference
3559
3560Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3561intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3562a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3563symbol that does not have a value.
3564
3565Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3566transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3567stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3568prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3569mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3570of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3571variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3572linker script variable might be referred to as:
3573
3574@smallexample
3575 extern int foo;
3576@end smallexample
3577
3578But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3579
3580@smallexample
3581 _foo = 1000;
3582@end smallexample
3583
3584In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3585transformation has taken place.
3586
3587When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3588things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3589in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3590second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3591table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3592contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3593value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3594
3595@smallexample
3596 int foo = 1000;
3597@end smallexample
3598
3599creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3600holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3601number 1000 is initially stored.
3602
3603When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3604first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3605memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3606So:
3607
3608@smallexample
3609 foo = 1;
3610@end smallexample
3611
3612looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3613associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3614address. Whereas:
3615
3616@smallexample
3617 int * a = & foo;
3618@end smallexample
3619
3620looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3621and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3622the variable @samp{a}.
3623
3624Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3625the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3626an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3627
3628@smallexample
3629 foo = 1000;
3630@end smallexample
3631
3632creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3633the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3634address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3635linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3636access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3637
3638Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3639you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3640use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3641section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3642linker script contains these declarations:
3643
3644@smallexample
3645@group
3646 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3647 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3648 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3649@end group
3650@end smallexample
3651
3652Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3653
3654@smallexample
3655@group
3656 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3657
73ae6183
NC
3658 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3659@end group
3660@end smallexample
3661
3662Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3663
252b5132 3664@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3665@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3666@kindex SECTIONS
3667The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3668into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3669
3670The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3671@smallexample
3672SECTIONS
3673@{
3674 @var{sections-command}
3675 @var{sections-command}
3676 @dots{}
3677@}
3678@end smallexample
3679
3680Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3681
3682@itemize @bullet
3683@item
3684an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3685@item
3686a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3687@item
3688an output section description
3689@item
3690an overlay description
3691@end itemize
3692
3693The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3694@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3695those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3696understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3697the layout of the output file.
3698
3699Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3700below.
3701
3702If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3703linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3704section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3705input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3706example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3707in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3708
3709@menu
3710* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3711* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3712* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3713* Input Section:: Input section description
3714* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3715* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3716* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3717* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3718* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3719@end menu
3720
3721@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3722@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3723The full description of an output section looks like this:
3724@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3725@group
7e7d5768 3726@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3727 [AT(@var{lma})]
3728 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3729 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3730 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3731 @{
3732 @var{output-section-command}
3733 @var{output-section-command}
3734 @dots{}
562d3460 3735 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3736@end group
3737@end smallexample
3738
3739Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3740
3741The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3742name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3743The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3744
3745Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3746
3747@itemize @bullet
3748@item
3749a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3750@item
3751an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3752@item
3753data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3754@item
3755a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3756@end itemize
3757
3758@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3759@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3760@cindex name, section
3761@cindex section name
3762The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3763meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3764support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3765must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3766example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3767output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3768names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3769quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3770characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3771commas must be quoted.
3772
3773The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3774Discarding}.
3775
3776@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3777@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3778@cindex address, section
3779@cindex section address
3780The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3781address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3782is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3783
3784If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3785section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3786to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3787alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3788contained within the output section.
3789
3790The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3791
3792@itemize @bullet
3793@item
3794If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3795is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3796in that region.
3797
3798@item
3799If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3800regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3801section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3802be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3803
3804@item
3805If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3806the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3807counter.
3808@end itemize
3809
3810@noindent
3811For example:
3812
252b5132
RH
3813@smallexample
3814.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3815@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3816
252b5132
RH
3817@noindent
3818and
ea5cae92 3819
252b5132
RH
3820@smallexample
3821.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3822@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3823
252b5132
RH
3824@noindent
3825are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3826@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3827counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3828counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3829input sections.
252b5132
RH
3830
3831The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3832For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3833so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3834do something like this:
3835@smallexample
3836.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3837@end smallexample
3838@noindent
3839This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3840aligned upward to the specified value.
3841
3842Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3843location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3844sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3845
3846@node Input Section
36f63dca 3847@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3848@cindex input sections
3849@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3850The most common output section command is an input section description.
3851
3852The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3853You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3854in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3855map the input files into your memory layout.
3856
3857@menu
3858* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3859* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3860* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3861* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3862* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3863@end menu
3864
3865@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3866@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3867@cindex input section basics
3868An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3869by a list of section names in parentheses.
3870
3871The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3872describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3873
3874The most common input section description is to include all input
3875sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3876include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3877@smallexample
3878*(.text)
3879@end smallexample
3880@noindent
18625d54
CM
3881Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3882of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3883match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3884example:
252b5132 3885@smallexample
b4346c09 3886*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3887@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3888will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3889@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3890
3891There are two ways to include more than one section:
3892@smallexample
3893*(.text .rdata)
3894*(.text) *(.rdata)
3895@end smallexample
3896@noindent
3897The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3898@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3899first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3900they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3901@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3902@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3903
3904You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3905You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3906needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3907@smallexample
3908data.o(.data)
3909@end smallexample
3910
ae17ab41
CM
3911To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3912of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3913
3914Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3915
3916@smallexample
3917@group
3918SECTIONS @{
3919 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3920 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3921@}
3922@end group
3923@end smallexample
3924
3925In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3926input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3927@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3928@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3929whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3930
967928e9
AM
3931You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3932matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3933with no whitespace around the colon.
3934
3935@table @samp
3936@item archive:file
3937matches file within archive
3938@item archive:
3939matches the whole archive
3940@item :file
3941matches file but not one in an archive
3942@end table
3943
3944Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3945wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3946single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3947@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3948within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3949also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3950other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3951from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3952command.
3953
252b5132
RH
3954If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3955the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3956commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3957@smallexample
3958data.o
3959@end smallexample
3960
967928e9
AM
3961When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3962and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3963characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3964name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3965did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3966though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3967@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3968the archive search path.
3969
3970@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3971@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3972@cindex input section wildcards
3973@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3974@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3975@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3976In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3977name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3978
3979The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3980pattern for the file name.
3981
3982The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3983
3984@table @samp
3985@item *
3986matches any number of characters
3987@item ?
3988matches any single character
3989@item [@var{chars}]
3990matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3991character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3992@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3993@item \
3994quotes the following character
3995@end table
3996
3997When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3998will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3999Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4000exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4001@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4002a @samp{/} character.
4003
4004File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4005specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4006does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4007
4008If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4009appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4010will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4011sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4012@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4013@smallexample
4014.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4015.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4016@end smallexample
4017
bcaa7b3e 4018@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4019Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4020in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4021this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4022pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4023@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4024into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4025
bcaa7b3e
L
4026@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4027@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4028difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4029ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4030
02ecc8e9
L
4031@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4032@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4033difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4034ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4035encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4036
bcaa7b3e
L
4037@cindex SORT
4038@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4039
4040When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4041can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4042
4043@enumerate
4044@item
4045@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4046It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4047sections have the same name.
4048@item
4049@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4050It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4051sections have the same alignment.
4052@item
c0065db7 4053@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4054treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4055@item
4056@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4057is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4058@item
4059All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4060@end enumerate
4061
4062When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4063section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4064takes precedence over the command line option.
4065
4066If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4067command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4068treated as nested sorting command.
4069
4070@enumerate
4071@item
4072@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4073@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4074@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4075@item
4076@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4077@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4078@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4079@end enumerate
4080
4081If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4082command line option will be ignored.
4083
eda680f8
L
4084@cindex SORT_NONE
4085@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4086section sorting option.
4087
252b5132
RH
4088If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4089@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4090precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4091
4092This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4093files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4094sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4095The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4096with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4097linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4098@smallexample
4099@group
4100SECTIONS @{
4101 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4102 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4103 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4104 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4105@}
4106@end group
4107@end smallexample
4108
4109@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4110@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4111@cindex common symbol placement
4112@cindex uninitialized data placement
4113A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4114file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4115linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4116named @samp{COMMON}.
4117
4118You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4119other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4120particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4121input files are placed in another section.
4122
4123In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4124@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4125@smallexample
4126.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4127@end smallexample
4128
4129@cindex scommon section
4130@cindex small common symbols
4131Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4132example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4133symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4134different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4135the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4136symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4137to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4138locations.
4139
4140@cindex [COMMON]
4141You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4142notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4143@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4144
4145@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4146@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4147@cindex KEEP
4148@cindex garbage collection
4149When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4150it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4151This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4152with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4153@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4154
4155@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4156@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4157The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4158to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4159start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4160@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4161follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4162@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4163@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4164All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4165files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4166
4167@smallexample
4168@group
4169SECTIONS @{
4170 outputa 0x10000 :
4171 @{
4172 all.o
4173 foo.o (.input1)
4174 @}
36f63dca
NC
4175@end group
4176@group
252b5132
RH
4177 outputb :
4178 @{
4179 foo.o (.input2)
4180 foo1.o (.input1)
4181 @}
36f63dca
NC
4182@end group
4183@group
252b5132
RH
4184 outputc :
4185 @{
4186 *(.input1)
4187 *(.input2)
4188 @}
4189@}
4190@end group
a1ab1d2a 4191@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4192
4193@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4194@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4195@cindex data
4196@cindex section data
4197@cindex output section data
4198@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4199@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4200@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4201@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4202@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4203You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4204@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4205an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4206parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4207value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4208counter.
4209
4210The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4211store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4212bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4213stored.
4214
4215For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4216of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4217@smallexample
4218BYTE(1)
4219LONG(addr)
4220@end smallexample
4221
4222When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4223same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4224target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4225@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4226@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4227
4228If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4229which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4230When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4231true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4232endianness of the first input object file.
4233
36f63dca 4234Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4235between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4236@smallexample
4237SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4238@end smallexample
4239whereas this will work:
4240@smallexample
4241SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4242@end smallexample
4243
252b5132
RH
4244@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4245@cindex holes, filling
4246@cindex unspecified memory
4247You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4248current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4249otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4250gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4251with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4252necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4253point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4254than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4255different parts of an output section.
4256
4257This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4258value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4259@smallexample
563e308f 4260FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4261@end smallexample
4262
4263The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4264section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4265part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4266entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4267precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4268expression.
252b5132
RH
4269
4270@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4271@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4272There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4273commands.
4274
4275@table @code
4276@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4277@cindex input filename symbols
4278@cindex filename symbols
4279@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4280The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4281The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4282file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4283the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4284
4285This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4286normally used for any other object file format.
4287
4288@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4289@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4290@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4291@item CONSTRUCTORS
4292When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4293unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4294destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4295arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4296automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4297For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4298linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4299@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4300ignored for other object file formats.
4301
4302The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4303constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4304Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4305the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4306first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4307of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4308compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4309formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4310@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4311the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4312destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4313@code{exit}.
4314
4315For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4316arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4317addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4318and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4319linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4320runtime code expects to see.
4321
4322@smallexample
4323 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4324 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4325 *(.ctors)
4326 LONG(0)
4327 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4328 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4329 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4330 *(.dtors)
4331 LONG(0)
4332 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4333@end smallexample
4334
4335If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4336which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4337are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4338are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4339command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4340@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4341@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4342@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4343
4344Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4345and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4346need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4347scripts.
4348
4349@end table
4350
4351@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4352@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4353@cindex discarding sections
4354@cindex sections, discarding
4355@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4356The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4357for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4358be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4359@smallexample
49c13adb 4360.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4361@end smallexample
4362@noindent
4363will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4364@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4365sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4366space in an output section will also create the output section.
4367
a0976ea4 4368The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4369on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4370symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4371the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4372section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4373
4374@cindex /DISCARD/
4375The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4376input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4377section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4378
4379@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4380@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4381@cindex output section attributes
4382We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4383like this:
0c71d759 4384
252b5132 4385@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4386@group
7e7d5768 4387@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4388 [AT(@var{lma})]
4389 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4390 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4391 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4392 @{
4393 @var{output-section-command}
4394 @var{output-section-command}
4395 @dots{}
562d3460 4396 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4397@end group
4398@end smallexample
0c71d759 4399
252b5132
RH
4400We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4401@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4402remaining section attributes.
4403
a1ab1d2a 4404@menu
252b5132
RH
4405* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4406* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4407* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4408* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4409* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4410* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4411* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4412* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4413@end menu
4414
4415@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4416@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4417Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4418parentheses. The following types are defined:
4419
4420@table @code
4421@item NOLOAD
4422The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4423loaded into memory when the program is run.
4424@item DSECT
4425@itemx COPY
4426@itemx INFO
4427@itemx OVERLAY
4428These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4429rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4430marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4431section when the program is run.
4432@end table
4433
4434@kindex NOLOAD
4435@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4436@cindex loading, preventing
4437The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4438the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4439the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4440@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4441need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4442@smallexample
4443@group
4444SECTIONS @{
4445 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4446 @dots{}
4447@}
4448@end group
4449@end smallexample
4450
4451@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4452@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4453@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4454@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4455@cindex load address
4456@cindex section load address
4457Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4458@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4459@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4460specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4461address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4462
ea5cae92
NC
4463The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4464specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4465takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4466load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4467region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4468
4469If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4470section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4471load address:
4472
4473@itemize @bullet
4474@item
4475If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4476the LMA address as well.
4477
4478@item
4479If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4480
4481@item
4482Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4483with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4484section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4485VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4486the last section in the located region.
4487
4488@item
4489If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4490that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4491
4492@item
4493If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4494section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4495@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4496
4497@cindex ROM initialized data
4498@cindex initialized data in ROM
4499This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4500example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4501called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4502@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4503even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4504uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4505defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4506counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4507
4508@smallexample
4509@group
4510SECTIONS
4511 @{
4512 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4513 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4514 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4515 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4516 .bss 0x3000 :
4517 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4518@}
4519@end group
4520@end smallexample
4521
4522The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4523this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4524the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4525how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4526script.
4527
4528@smallexample
4529@group
4530extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4531char *src = &_etext;
4532char *dst = &_data;
4533
ea5cae92
NC
4534/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4535while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4536 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4537
ea5cae92 4538/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4539for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4540 *dst = 0;
4541@end group
4542@end smallexample
4543
bbf115d3
L
4544@node Forced Output Alignment
4545@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4546@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4547@cindex forcing output section alignment
4548@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4549You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4550
7e7d5768
AM
4551@node Forced Input Alignment
4552@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4553@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4554@cindex forcing input section alignment
4555@cindex input section alignment
4556You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4557SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4558sections, whether larger or smaller.
4559
0c71d759
NC
4560@node Output Section Constraint
4561@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4562@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4563@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4564@cindex constraints on output sections
4565You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4566of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4567read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4568@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4569
252b5132 4570@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4571@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4572@kindex >@var{region}
4573@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4574@cindex memory regions and sections
4575You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4576using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4577
4578Here is a simple example:
4579@smallexample
4580@group
4581MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4582SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4583@end group
4584@end smallexample
4585
4586@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4587@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4588@kindex :@var{phdr}
4589@cindex section, assigning to program header
4590@cindex program headers and sections
4591You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4592using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4593one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4594assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4595@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4596linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4597
4598Here is a simple example:
4599@smallexample
4600@group
4601PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4602SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4603@end group
4604@end smallexample
4605
4606@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4607@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4608@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4609@cindex section fill pattern
4610@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4611You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4612@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4613(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4614within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4615alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4616necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4617of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4618an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4619fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4620other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4621pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4622expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4623
4624You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4625output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4626
4627Here is a simple example:
4628@smallexample
4629@group
563e308f 4630SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4631@end group
4632@end smallexample
4633
4634@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4635@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4636@kindex OVERLAY
4637@cindex overlays
4638An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4639are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4640the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4641copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4642required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4643can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4644than another.
4645
4646Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4647@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4648output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4649command is as follows:
4650@smallexample
4651@group
4652OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4653 @{
4654 @var{secname1}
4655 @{
4656 @var{output-section-command}
4657 @var{output-section-command}
4658 @dots{}
4659 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4660 @var{secname2}
4661 @{
4662 @var{output-section-command}
4663 @var{output-section-command}
4664 @dots{}
4665 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4666 @dots{}
4667 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4668@end group
4669@end smallexample
4670
4671Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4672section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4673section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4674those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4675except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4676sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4677
4678The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4679addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4680memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4681whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4682and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4683and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4684
4685If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4686among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4687all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4688section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4689NOCROSSREFS}.
4690
4691For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4692provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4693defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4694@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4695the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4696within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4697symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4698
4699At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4700the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4701
4702Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4703@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4704@smallexample
4705@group
4706 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4707 @{
4708 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4709 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4710 @}
4711@end group
4712@end smallexample
4713@noindent
4714This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4715address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4716@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4717following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4718@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4719@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4720
4721C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4722like the following.
4723
4724@smallexample
4725@group
4726 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4727 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4728 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4729@end group
4730@end smallexample
4731
4732Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4733everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4734example could have been written identically as follows.
4735
4736@smallexample
4737@group
4738 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4739 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4740 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4741 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4742 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4743 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4744 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4745@end group
4746@end smallexample
4747
4748@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4749@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4750@kindex MEMORY
4751@cindex memory regions
4752@cindex regions of memory
4753@cindex allocating memory
4754@cindex discontinuous memory
4755The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4756memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4757
4758The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4759memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4760may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4761can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4762set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4763regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4764around to fit into the available regions.
4765
4766A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4767command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4768you wish. The syntax is:
4769@smallexample
4770@group
a1ab1d2a 4771MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4772 @{
4773 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4774 @dots{}
4775 @}
4776@end group
4777@end smallexample
4778
4779The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4780region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4781Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4782with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4783must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4784add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4785command.
252b5132
RH
4786
4787@cindex memory region attributes
4788The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4789whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4790not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4791@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4792section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4793the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4794them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4795
4796The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4797@table @samp
4798@item R
4799Read-only section
4800@item W
4801Read/write section
4802@item X
4803Executable section
4804@item A
4805Allocatable section
4806@item I
4807Initialized section
4808@item L
4809Same as @samp{I}
4810@item !
c09e9a8c 4811Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4812@end table
4813
4814If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4815@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4816attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4817in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4818attributes.
4819
4820@kindex ORIGIN =
4821@kindex o =
4822@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4823The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4824the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4825cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4826abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4827@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4828
4829@kindex LENGTH =
4830@kindex len =
4831@kindex l =
4832The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4833region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4834be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4835@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4836
4837In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4838available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4839and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4840linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4841is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4842or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4843explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4844region.
4845
4846@smallexample
4847@group
a1ab1d2a 4848MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4849 @{
4850 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4851 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4852 @}
4853@end group
4854@end smallexample
4855
4856Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4857specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4858@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4859a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4860output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4861was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4862the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4863output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4864region, the linker will issue an error message.
4865
3ec57632 4866It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4867expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4868@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4869
4870@smallexample
4871@group
c0065db7 4872 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4873@end group
4874@end smallexample
4875
252b5132
RH
4876@node PHDRS
4877@section PHDRS Command
4878@kindex PHDRS
4879@cindex program headers
4880@cindex ELF program headers
4881@cindex program segments
4882@cindex segments, ELF
4883The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4884@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4885loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4886program with the @samp{-p} option.
4887
4888When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4889reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4890program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4891This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4892interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4893
4894The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4895in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4896precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4897the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4898not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4899
4900The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4901generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4902ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4903
4904This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4905@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4906
4907@smallexample
4908@group
4909PHDRS
4910@{
4911 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4912 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4913@}
4914@end group
4915@end smallexample
4916
4917The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4918of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4919header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4920with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4921must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4922is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4923
4924Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4925system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4926specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4927sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4928attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4929Section Phdr}.
4930
4931It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4932merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4933repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4934contain the section.
4935
4936If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4937then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4938not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4939convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4940placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4941default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4942segment at all.
4943
4944@kindex FILEHDR
4945@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4946You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4947the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4948The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4949file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4950include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4951segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4952these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4953
4954The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4955value of the keyword.
4956
4957@table @asis
4958@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4959Indicates an unused program header.
4960
4961@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4962Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4963the file.
4964
4965@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4966Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4967
4968@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4969Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4970found.
4971
4972@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4973Indicates a segment holding note information.
4974
4975@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4976A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4977ABI.
4978
4979@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4980Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4981
4982@item @var{expression}
4983An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4984be used for types not defined above.
4985@end table
4986
4987You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4988in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4989@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4990Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4991output section attribute.
4992
4993The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4994which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4995explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4996an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4997header.
4998
4999Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5000headers used on a native ELF system.
5001
5002@example
5003@group
5004PHDRS
5005@{
5006 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5007 interp PT_INTERP ;
5008 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5009 data PT_LOAD ;
5010 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5011@}
5012
5013SECTIONS
5014@{
5015 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5016 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5017 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5018 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5019 @dots{}
5020 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5021 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5022 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5023 @dots{}
5024@}
5025@end group
5026@end example
5027
5028@node VERSION
5029@section VERSION Command
5030@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5031@cindex symbol versions
5032@cindex version script
5033@cindex versions of symbols
5034The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5035only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5036symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5037a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5038shared library.
5039
5040You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5041you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5042also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5043
5044The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5045@smallexample
5046VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5047@end smallexample
5048
5049The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5050Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5051version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5052version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5053version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5054scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5055library.
5056
5057The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5058examples.
5059
5060@smallexample
5061VERS_1.1 @{
5062 global:
5063 foo1;
5064 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5065 old*;
5066 original*;
5067 new*;
252b5132
RH
5068@};
5069
5070VERS_1.2 @{
5071 foo2;
5072@} VERS_1.1;
5073
5074VERS_2.0 @{
5075 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5076 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5077 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5078 "f(int, double)";
5079 @};
252b5132
RH
5080@} VERS_1.2;
5081@end smallexample
5082
5083This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5084version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5085The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5086a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5087of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5088symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5089is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5090in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5091However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5092name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5093
5094Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5095depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5096to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5097
5098Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5099depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5100and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5101
5102When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5103specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5104unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5105unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5106somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5107wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5108wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5109set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5110ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5111
5112The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5113they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5114could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5115However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5116
0f6bf451 5117Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5118in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5119symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5120won't.
5121
5122@smallexample
7c9c73be 5123@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5124@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5125
252b5132
RH
5126When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5127symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5128requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5129shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5130loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5131linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5132application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5133way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5134all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5135search for each symbol reference.
5136
5137The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5138doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5139that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5140functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5141the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5142required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5143that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5144versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5145the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5146
5147There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5148first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5149source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5150script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5151maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5152@smallexample
5153__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5154@end smallexample
5155@noindent
5156in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5157be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5158The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5159@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5160takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5161
5162The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5163function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5164an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5165version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5166linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5167
5168To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5169source file. Here is an example:
5170
5171@smallexample
5172__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5173__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5174__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5175__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5176@end smallexample
5177
5178In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5179unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5180example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5181@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5182
5183When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5184some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5185this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5186@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5187declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5188you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5189
5190If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5191within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5192(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5193specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5194
cb840a31
L
5195You can also specify the language in the version script:
5196
5197@smallexample
5198VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5199@end smallexample
5200
c0065db7 5201The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5202The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5203demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5204patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5205@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5206
86043bbb
MM
5207Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5208described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5209or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5210the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5211whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5212cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5213might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5214should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5215expect when you upgrade.
5216
252b5132
RH
5217@node Expressions
5218@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5219@cindex expressions
5220@cindex arithmetic
5221The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5222that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5223expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5224host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5225
5226You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5227
5228The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5229expressions.
5230
5231@menu
5232* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5233* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5234* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5235* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5236* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5237* Operators:: Operators
5238* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5239* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5240* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5241@end menu
5242
5243@node Constants
5244@subsection Constants
5245@cindex integer notation
5246@cindex constants in linker scripts
5247All constants are integers.
5248
5249As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5250octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5251hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5252@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5253@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5254value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5255
5256@cindex scaled integers
5257@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5258@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5259@cindex suffixes for integers
5260@cindex integer suffixes
5261In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5262constant by
5263@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5264@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5265@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5266@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5267@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5268@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5269@tex
5270${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5271@end tex
5272@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5273respectively. For example, the following
5274all refer to the same quantity:
5275
252b5132 5276@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5277_fourk_1 = 4K;
5278_fourk_2 = 4096;
5279_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5280_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5281@end smallexample
5282
8a308ae8
NC
5283Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5284conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5285
0c71d759
NC
5286@node Symbolic Constants
5287@subsection Symbolic Constants
5288@cindex symbolic constants
5289@kindex CONSTANT
5290It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5291the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5292
5293@table @code
5294@item MAXPAGESIZE
5295@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5296The target's maximum page size.
5297
5298@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5299@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5300The target's default page size.
5301@end table
5302
5303So for example:
5304
5305@smallexample
9d5777a3 5306 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5307@end smallexample
5308
5309will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5310supported by the target.
5311
252b5132
RH
5312@node Symbols
5313@subsection Symbol Names
5314@cindex symbol names
5315@cindex names
5316@cindex quoted symbol names
5317@kindex "
5318Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5319and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5320Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5321specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5322keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5323@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5324"SECTION" = 9;
5325"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5326@end smallexample
5327
5328Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5329to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5330whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5331
ecca9871
L
5332@node Orphan Sections
5333@subsection Orphan Sections
5334@cindex orphan
5335Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5336are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5337script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5338output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5339placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5340attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5341same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5342If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5343at the end of the file.
5344
5345For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5346well as section flag.
5347
41911f68 5348If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5349the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5350__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5351section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5352orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5353representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5354character.
5355
252b5132
RH
5356@node Location Counter
5357@subsection The Location Counter
5358@kindex .
5359@cindex dot
5360@cindex location counter
5361@cindex current output location
5362The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5363current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5364location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5365within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5366anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5367
5368@cindex holes
5369Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5370moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5371location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5372and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5373doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5374
5375@smallexample
5376SECTIONS
5377@{
5378 output :
5379 @{
5380 file1(.text)
5381 . = . + 1000;
5382 file2(.text)
5383 . += 1000;
5384 file3(.text)
563e308f 5385 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5386@}
5387@end smallexample
5388@noindent
5389In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5390located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5391followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5392@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5393@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5394specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5395
5c6bbab8
NC
5396@cindex dot inside sections
5397Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5398current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5399statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5400absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5401however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5402not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5403
5404@smallexample
5405SECTIONS
5406@{
5407 . = 0x100
5408 .text: @{
5409 *(.text)
5410 . = 0x200
5411 @}
5412 . = 0x500
5413 .data: @{
5414 *(.data)
5415 . += 0x600
5416 @}
5417@}
5418@end smallexample
5419
5420The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5421and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5422the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5423much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5424move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5425and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5426the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5427the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5428
b5666f2f
AM
5429@cindex dot outside sections
5430Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5431output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5432needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5433
5434@smallexample
5435SECTIONS
5436@{
5437 start_of_text = . ;
5438 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5439 end_of_text = . ;
5440
5441 start_of_data = . ;
5442 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5443 end_of_data = . ;
5444@}
5445@end smallexample
5446
5447If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5448not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5449between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5450should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5451blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5452the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5453sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5454statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5455special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5456place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5457as follows:
5458
5459@smallexample
5460SECTIONS
5461@{
5462 start_of_text = . ;
5463 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5464 end_of_text = . ;
5465
5466 start_of_data = . ;
5467 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5468 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5469 end_of_data = . ;
5470@}
5471@end smallexample
5472
5473This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5474@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5475placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5476assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5477a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5478section. So you could write:
5479
5480@smallexample
5481SECTIONS
5482@{
5483 start_of_text = . ;
5484 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5485 end_of_text = . ;
5486
5487 . = . ;
5488 start_of_data = . ;
5489 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5490 end_of_data = . ;
5491@}
5492@end smallexample
5493
5494Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5495@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5496
252b5132
RH
5497@need 2000
5498@node Operators
5499@subsection Operators
5500@cindex operators for arithmetic
5501@cindex arithmetic operators
5502@cindex precedence in expressions
5503The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5504the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5505@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5506@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5507@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5508@smallexample
5509precedence associativity Operators Notes
5510(highest)
55111 left ! - ~ (1)
55122 left * / %
55133 left + -
55144 left >> <<
55155 left == != > < <= >=
55166 left &
55177 left |
55188 left &&
55199 left ||
552010 right ? :
552111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5522(lowest)
5523@end smallexample
5524Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5525(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5526(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5527@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5528@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5529@tex
5530\vskip \baselineskip
5531%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5532\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5533\hrule
5534\halign
5535{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5536height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5537&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5538height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5539\noalign{\hrule}
5540height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5541&highest&&&&&\cr
5542% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5543&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5544&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5545&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5546&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5547&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5548&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5549&7&&left&&|&\cr
5550&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5551&9&&left&&||&\cr
5552&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5553&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5554&lowest&&&&&\cr
5555height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5556\hrule}
5557@end tex
5558@iftex
5559{
5560@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5561@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5562@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5563}
5564@end iftex
5565@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5566
5567@node Evaluation
5568@subsection Evaluation
5569@cindex lazy evaluation
5570@cindex expression evaluation order
5571The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5572an expression when absolutely necessary.
5573
5574The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5575address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5576regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5577as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5578
5579However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5580until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5581other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5582for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5583
5584The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5585assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5586allocation.
5587
5588Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5589@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5590
5591If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5592available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5593following
5594@smallexample
5595@group
5596SECTIONS
5597 @{
a1ab1d2a 5598 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5599 @{ *(.text) @}
5600 @}
5601@end group
5602@end smallexample
5603@noindent
5604will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5605address}.
5606
5607@node Expression Section
5608@subsection The Section of an Expression
5609@cindex expression sections
5610@cindex absolute expressions
5611@cindex relative expressions
5612@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5613@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5614@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5615Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5616relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5617using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5618value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5619symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5620operations.
5621
abf4be64
AM
5622Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5623section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5624address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5625@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5626functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5627One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5628(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5629differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5630versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5631section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5632Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5633absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5634given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5635everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5636
5637In the following simple example,
252b5132 5638
7542af2a
AM
5639@smallexample
5640@group
5641SECTIONS
5642 @{
5643 . = 0x100;
5644 __executable_start = 0x100;
5645 .data :
5646 @{
5647 . = 0x10;
5648 __data_start = 0x10;
5649 *(.data)
5650 @}
5651 @dots{}
5652 @}
5653@end group
5654@end smallexample
252b5132 5655
7542af2a
AM
5656both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5657address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5658@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5659section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5660
5c3049d2
AM
5661For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5662addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5663
5664@itemize @bullet
5665@item
c05f749e
AM
5666Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5667operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5668absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5669@item
7542af2a
AM
5670Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5671relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5672and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5673@item
c05f749e
AM
5674Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5675in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5676address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5677before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5678@end itemize
5679
5680The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5681
5682@itemize @bullet
5683@item
5684An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5685@item
5686The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5687@item
9bc8bb33 5688The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5689relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5690(after above conversions) is also a number.
5691@item
5692The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5693relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5694section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5695@item
5696The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5697conversions) is an absolute address.
5698@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5699
5700You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5701to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5702create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5703section @samp{.data}:
5704@smallexample
5705SECTIONS
5706 @{
5707 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5708 @}
5709@end smallexample
5710@noindent
5711If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5712@samp{.data} section.
5713
7542af2a
AM
5714Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5715particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5716
252b5132
RH
5717@node Builtin Functions
5718@subsection Builtin Functions
5719@cindex functions in expressions
5720The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5721use in linker script expressions.
5722
5723@table @code
5724@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5725@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5726@cindex expression, absolute
5727Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5728of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5729value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5730normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5731
5732@item ADDR(@var{section})
5733@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5734@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5735Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5736script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5737the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5738@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5739@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5740the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5741@smallexample
5742@group
5743SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5744 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5745 @{
252b5132
RH
5746 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5747 @dots{}
5748 @}
5749 .output :
5750 @{
5751 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5752 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5753 @}
5754@dots{} @}
5755@end group
5756@end smallexample
5757
876f4090
NS
5758@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5759@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5760@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5761@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5762@cindex round up location counter
5763@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5764@cindex round up expression
5765@cindex align expression
5766Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5767to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5768doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5769arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5770expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5771equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5772
5773Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5774next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5775variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5776input sections:
252b5132
RH
5777@smallexample
5778@group
5779SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5780 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5781 *(.data)
5782 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5783 @}
5784@dots{} @}
5785@end group
5786@end smallexample
5787@noindent
5788The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5789a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5790a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5791of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5792
5793The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5794
362c1d1a
NS
5795@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5796@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5797@cindex section alignment
5798Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5799been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5800evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5801the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5802value in that section.
5803@smallexample
5804@group
5805SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5806 .output @{
5807 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5808 @dots{}
5809 @}
5810@dots{} @}
5811@end group
5812@end smallexample
5813
252b5132
RH
5814@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5815@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5816This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5817scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5818section.
5819
2d20f7bf
JJ
5820@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5821@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5822This is equivalent to either
5823@smallexample
5824(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5825@end smallexample
5826or
5827@smallexample
5828(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5829@end smallexample
5830@noindent
5831depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5832for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5833@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5834If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5835memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5836bytes in the on-disk file.
5837
5838This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5839any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5840@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5841be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5842working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5843
5844@noindent
5845Example:
5846@smallexample
5847 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5848@end smallexample
5849
5850@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5851@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5852This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5853evaluation purposes.
5854
5855@smallexample
5856 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5857@end smallexample
5858
a4f5ad88
JJ
5859@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5860@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5861This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5862@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5863When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5864does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5865@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5866boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5867it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5868@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5869
5870@smallexample
5871 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5872@end smallexample
5873
252b5132
RH
5874@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5875@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5876@cindex symbol defaults
5877Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5878defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5879return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5880default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5881shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5882the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5883existed, its value is preserved:
5884
5885@smallexample
5886@group
5887SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5888 .text : @{
5889 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5890 @dots{}
5891 @}
5892 @dots{}
5893@}
5894@end group
5895@end smallexample
5896
3ec57632
NC
5897@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5898@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5899Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5900
252b5132
RH
5901@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5902@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5903@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5904Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5905Section LMA}).
5906
5907@kindex MAX
5908@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5909Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5910
5911@kindex MIN
5912@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5913Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5914
5915@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5916@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5917@cindex unallocated address, next
5918Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5919This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5920use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5921output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5922
3ec57632
NC
5923@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5924@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5925Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5926
ba916c8a
MM
5927@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5928@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5929Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5930value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5931option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5932@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5933be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5934``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5935name.
5936
252b5132
RH
5937@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5938@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5939@cindex section size
5940Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5941been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5942evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5943@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5944@smallexample
5945@group
5946SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5947 .output @{
5948 .start = . ;
5949 @dots{}
5950 .end = . ;
5951 @}
5952 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5953 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5954@dots{} @}
5955@end group
5956@end smallexample
5957
5958@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5959@itemx sizeof_headers
5960@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5961@cindex header size
5962Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5963information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5964this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5965choose, to facilitate paging.
5966
5967@cindex not enough room for program headers
5968@cindex program headers, not enough room
5969When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5970@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5971number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5972addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5973additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5974room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5975the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5976script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5977you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5978command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5979@end table
5980
5981@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5982@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5983@cindex implicit linker scripts
5984If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5985an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5986linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5987linker will report an error.
5988
5989An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5990
5991Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5992assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5993commands.
5994
5995Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5996at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5997read. This can affect archive searching.
5998
5999@ifset GENERIC
6000@node Machine Dependent
6001@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6002
6003@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6004@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6005sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6006functionality are not listed.
6007
6008@menu
36f63dca
NC
6009@ifset H8300
6010* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6011@end ifset
6012@ifset I960
6013* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6014@end ifset
6015@ifset ARM
6016* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6017@end ifset
6018@ifset HPPA
6019* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6020@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6021@ifset M68K
6022* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6023@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6024@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6025* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6026@end ifset
2469cfa2 6027@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6028* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6029@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
6030@ifset M68HC11
6031* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6032@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6033@ifset POWERPC
6034* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6035@end ifset
6036@ifset POWERPC64
6037* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6038@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6039@ifset SPU
6040* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6041@end ifset
74459f0e 6042@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6043* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6044@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6045@ifset WIN32
6046* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6047@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6048@ifset XTENSA
6049* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6050@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6051@end menu
6052@end ifset
6053
252b5132
RH
6054@ifset H8300
6055@ifclear GENERIC
6056@raisesections
6057@end ifclear
6058
6059@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6060@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6061
6062@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6063For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6064you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6065
6066@table @emph
6067@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6068@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6069@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6070targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6071program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6072respectively.
6073
6074@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6075@item synthesizing instructions
6076@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6077@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6078sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6079page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6080(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6081@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6082top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6083
6084@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6085@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6086biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6087which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6088page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6089(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6090@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6091the top page of memory).
6092
6093@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6094@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
609532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6096changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6097(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6098@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6099the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6100@end table
6101
6102@ifclear GENERIC
6103@lowersections
6104@end ifclear
6105@end ifset
6106
36f63dca 6107@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6108@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6109@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6110@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6111@node Renesas
6112@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6113
c2dcd04e
NC
6114@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6115H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6116options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6117@end ifset
6118@end ifclear
6119
6120@ifset I960
6121@ifclear GENERIC
6122@raisesections
6123@end ifclear
6124
6125@node i960
6126@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6127
6128@cindex i960 support
6129
6130You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6131specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6132family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6133incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6134linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6135libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6136search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6137
6138For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6139well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6140paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6141the names
6142
6143@smallexample
6144@group
6145try
6146libtry.a
6147tryca
6148libtryca.a
6149@end group
6150@end smallexample
6151
6152@noindent
6153The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6154two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6155
6156You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6157the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6158use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6159specifies a library.
6160
6161@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6162@cindex relaxing on i960
6163@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6164you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6165@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6166them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6167instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6168instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6169target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6170not itself call any subroutines).
6171
48229727
JB
6172@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6173@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6174@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6175The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6176
6177The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6178
85fdf906
AH
6179@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6180@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6181The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6182
36f63dca
NC
6183@ifclear GENERIC
6184@lowersections
6185@end ifclear
6186@end ifset
6187
6188@ifset ARM
6189@ifclear GENERIC
6190@raisesections
6191@end ifclear
6192
93fd0973
SC
6193@ifset M68HC11
6194@ifclear GENERIC
6195@raisesections
6196@end ifclear
6197
6198@node M68HC11/68HC12
6199@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6200
6201@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6202
6203@subsection Linker Relaxation
6204
6205For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6206optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6207
6208@table @emph
6209@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6210@item relaxing address modes
6211@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6212targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6213program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6214respectively.
6215
6216@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6217transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6218page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6219
6220@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6221When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6222of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6223addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6224@code{bset} instructions.
6225
6226@end table
6227
6228@subsection Trampoline Generation
6229
6230@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6231@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6232For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6233call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6234will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6235trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6236case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6237point to the function trampoline.
6238
6239@ifclear GENERIC
6240@lowersections
6241@end ifclear
6242@end ifset
6243
36f63dca 6244@node ARM
3674e28a 6245@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6246
6247@cindex ARM interworking support
6248@kindex --support-old-code
6249For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6250between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6251been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6252line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6253libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6254option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6255given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6256which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6257the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6258non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6259
6260@cindex thumb entry point
6261@cindex entry point, thumb
6262@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6263The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6264@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6265But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6266branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6267executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6268
ce11ba6c
KT
6269@cindex PE import table prefixing
6270@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6271The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6272the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6273element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6274import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6275
e489d0ae
PB
6276@cindex BE8
6277@kindex --be8
6278The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6279executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6280The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6281
3674e28a
PB
6282@cindex TARGET1
6283@kindex --target1-rel
6284@kindex --target1-abs
6285The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6286@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6287or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6288and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6289
6290@cindex TARGET2
6291@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6292The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6293@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6294meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6295@table @samp
6296@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6297@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6298@item abs
6299@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6300@item got-rel
6301@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6302@end table
6303
319850b4
JB
6304@cindex FIX_V4BX
6305@kindex --fix-v4bx
6306The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6307specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6308interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6309also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6310
6311In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6312linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6313@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6314
6315In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6316relocations are ignored.
6317
845b51d6
PB
6318@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6319@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6320Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6321relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6322
6323@smallexample
6324TST rM, #1
6325MOVEQ PC, rM
6326BX Rn
6327@end smallexample
6328
6329This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6330and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6331condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6332
33bfe774
JB
6333@cindex USE_BLX
6334@kindex --use-blx
6335The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6336BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6337situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6338code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6339each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6340
6341This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6342specify it if you are using that target.
6343
c6dd86c6
JB
6344@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6345@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6346The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6347bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6348instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6349to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6350the support code can read the intended values.
6351
6352The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6353intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6354and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6355intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6356full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6357you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6358
6359If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6360enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6361@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6362mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6363vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6364@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6365
6366If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6367potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6368such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6369first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6370instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6371the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6372are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6373
2de70689
MGD
6374@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6375@kindex --fix-arm1176
6376@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6377The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6378in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6379are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6380unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6381
9d5777a3 6382Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6383Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6384http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6385
bf21ed78
MS
6386@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6387@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6388The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6389warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6390enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6391linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6392using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6393not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6394
6395@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6396@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6397The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6398warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6399@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6400linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6401using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6402
726150b7
NC
6403@cindex PIC_VENEER
6404@kindex --pic-veneer
6405The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6406ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6407is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6408@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6409
6410@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6411@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6412The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6413code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6414perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6415placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6416controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6417The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6418duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6419group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6420code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6421where they should be placed.
6422
6423The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6424@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6425placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6426branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6427placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6428value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6429exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6430A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6431linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6432from the input sections.
6433
6434The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6435@samp{N = +1}.
6436
1a51c1a4
NC
6437Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6438only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6439otherwise.
6440
36f63dca
NC
6441@ifclear GENERIC
6442@lowersections
6443@end ifclear
6444@end ifset
6445
6446@ifset HPPA
6447@ifclear GENERIC
6448@raisesections
6449@end ifclear
6450
6451@node HPPA ELF32
6452@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6453@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6454@kindex --multi-subspace
6455When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6456import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6457The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6458stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6459multiple sub-spaces.
6460
6461@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6462@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6463Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6464stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6465@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6466sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6467a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6468the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6469conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6470prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6471A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6472branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6473@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6474@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6475detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6476positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6477
6478Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6479single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6480create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6481large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6482
6483@ifclear GENERIC
6484@lowersections
6485@end ifclear
6486@end ifset
6487
7fb9f789
NC
6488@ifset M68K
6489@ifclear GENERIC
6490@raisesections
6491@end ifclear
6492
6493@node M68K
6494@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6495
6496@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6497@kindex --got=@var{type}
6498The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6499The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6500@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6501the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6502@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6503entries only at non-negative offsets.
6504@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6505entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6506support such GOTs.
6507@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6508output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6509file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6510files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6511
6512@ifclear GENERIC
6513@lowersections
6514@end ifclear
6515@end ifset
6516
36f63dca
NC
6517@ifset MMIX
6518@ifclear GENERIC
6519@raisesections
6520@end ifclear
6521
6522@node MMIX
6523@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6524For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6525@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6526understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6527can translate between the two formats.
6528
6529There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6530Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6531registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6532equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6533@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6534global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6535this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6536symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6537
7a2de473
HPN
6538Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6539@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6540The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6541of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6542
6543Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6544are left out from an mmo file.
6545
6546@ifclear GENERIC
6547@lowersections
6548@end ifclear
6549@end ifset
6550
6551@ifset MSP430
6552@ifclear GENERIC
6553@raisesections
6554@end ifclear
6555
6556@node MSP430
6557@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6558For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6559will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6560just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6561
6562@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6563The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6564
6565@table @code
6566@item @samp{.vectors}
6567Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6568
6569@item @samp{.bootloader}
6570Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6571in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6572
6573@item @samp{.infomem}
6574Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6575this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6576
c0065db7 6577@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6578This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6579in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6580
6581@item @samp{.noinit}
6582Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6583
c0065db7 6584The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6585@end table
6586
6587@ifclear GENERIC
6588@lowersections
6589@end ifclear
6590@end ifset
6591
2a60a7a8
AM
6592@ifset POWERPC
6593@ifclear GENERIC
6594@raisesections
6595@end ifclear
6596
6597@node PowerPC ELF32
6598@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6599@cindex PowerPC long branches
6600@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6601Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6602displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6603@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6604@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6605the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6606section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6607section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6608@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6609both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6610considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6611
6612@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6613@table @option
6614@cindex PowerPC PLT
6615@kindex --bss-plt
6616@item --bss-plt
6617Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6618generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6619the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6620writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6621@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6622PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6623compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6624BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6625
016687f8
AM
6626@kindex --secure-plt
6627@item --secure-plt
6628@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6629@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6630when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6631layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6632style BSS PLT.
6633
2a60a7a8
AM
6634@cindex PowerPC GOT
6635@kindex --sdata-got
6636@item --sdata-got
6637The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6638sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6639@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6640section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6641@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6642@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6643@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6644@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6645PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6646pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6647GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6648really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6649
6650@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6651@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6652@item --emit-stub-syms
6653This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6654symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6655
6656@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6657@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6658@item --no-tls-optimize
6659PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6660sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6661disable the optimization.
6662@end table
6663
6664@ifclear GENERIC
6665@lowersections
6666@end ifclear
6667@end ifset
6668
6669@ifset POWERPC64
6670@ifclear GENERIC
6671@raisesections
6672@end ifclear
6673
6674@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6675@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6676
6677@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6678@table @option
6679@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6680@kindex --stub-group-size
6681@item --stub-group-size
6682Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6683by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6684@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6685sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6686a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6687the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6688conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6689prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6690A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6691branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6692@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6693@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6694detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6695positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6696
6697Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6698single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6699create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6700large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6701
6702@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6703@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6704@item --emit-stub-syms
6705This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6706symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6707
6708@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6709@kindex --dotsyms
6710@kindex --no-dotsyms
6711@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6712These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6713in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6714function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6715code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6716properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6717to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6718@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6719dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6720feature.
6721
6722@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6723@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6724@item --no-tls-optimize
6725PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6726sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6727disable the optimization.
6728
6729@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6730@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6731@item --no-opd-optimize
6732PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6733corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6734the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6735Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6736
6737@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6738@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6739@item --non-overlapping-opd
6740Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6741@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6742the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6743entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6744
6745@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6746@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6747@item --no-toc-optimize
6748PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6749entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6750reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6751marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6752marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6753relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6754unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6755reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6756discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6757reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6758code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6759optimization.
6760
6761@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6762@kindex --no-multi-toc
6763@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6764If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6765@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6766where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6767entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6768total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6769grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6770TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6771calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6772help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
677364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6774Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6775
6776@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6777@kindex --no-toc-sort
6778@item --no-toc-sort
6779By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6780happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6781placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6782with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6783referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6784@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6785results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6786off this feature.
6787
6788@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6789@kindex --plt-align
6790@kindex --no-plt-align
6791@item --plt-align
6792@itemx --no-plt-align
6793Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6794aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6795boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6796are packed tightly.
6797
6798@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6799@kindex --plt-static-chain
6800@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6801@item --plt-static-chain
6802@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6803Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6804chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6805chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6806
6807@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6808@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6809@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6810@item --plt-thread-safe
6811@itemx --no-thread-safe
6812With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6813lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6814another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6815order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6816memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6817barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6818looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6819seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6820default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6821@end table
6822
6823@ifclear GENERIC
6824@lowersections
6825@end ifclear
6826@end ifset
6827
49fa1e15
AM
6828@ifset SPU
6829@ifclear GENERIC
6830@raisesections
6831@end ifclear
6832
6833@node SPU ELF
6834@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6835
6836@cindex SPU ELF options
6837@table @option
6838
6839@cindex SPU plugins
6840@kindex --plugin
6841@item --plugin
6842This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6843
6844@cindex SPU overlays
6845@kindex --no-overlays
6846@item --no-overlays
6847Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6848regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6849@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6850turns off all this special overlay handling.
6851
6852@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6853@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6854@item --emit-stub-syms
6855This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6856symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6857
6858@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6859@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6860@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6861This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6862function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6863on calls to non-overlay regions.
6864
6865@cindex SPU local store size
6866@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6867@item --local-store=lo:hi
6868@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6869the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6870range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6871
c0065db7 6872@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6873@kindex --stack-analysis
6874@item --stack-analysis
6875SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6876unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6877under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6878@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6879@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6880determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6881for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6882for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6883for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6884find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6885and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6886under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6887dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6888is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6889and calls will be given.
6890
c0065db7 6891@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6892@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6893@item --emit-stack-syms
6894This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6895in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6896These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6897functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6898functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6899such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6900The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6901@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6902@end table
6903
6904@ifclear GENERIC
6905@lowersections
6906@end ifclear
6907@end ifset
6908
36f63dca
NC
6909@ifset TICOFF
6910@ifclear GENERIC
6911@raisesections
6912@end ifclear
6913
6914@node TI COFF
6915@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6916@cindex TI COFF versions
6917@kindex --format=@var{version}
6918The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6919TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6920also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6921format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6922header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6923
6924@ifclear GENERIC
6925@lowersections
6926@end ifclear
6927@end ifset
6928
2ca22b03
NC
6929@ifset WIN32
6930@ifclear GENERIC
6931@raisesections
6932@end ifclear
6933
6934@node WIN32
6935@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6936
c0065db7 6937This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6938See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6939command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6940
6941@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6942@cindex import libraries
6943@item import libraries
69da35b5 6944The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6945libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6946regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6947archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6948support for creating such libraries provided with the
6949@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6950
c0065db7
RM
6951@item exporting DLL symbols
6952@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6953The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6954
6955@table @emph
6956@item using auto-export functionality
6957@cindex using auto-export functionality
6958By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6959which is controlled by the following command line options:
6960
0a5d968e
NC
6961@itemize
6962@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6963@item --exclude-symbols
6964@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6965@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6966@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6967@end itemize
6968
09e2aba4
DK
6969When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6970(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6971symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6972often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6973private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 6974options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
6975exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6976final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6977
6978If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6979command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6980if either of the following are true:
6981
6982@itemize
6983@item A DEF file is used.
6984@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6985@end itemize
dc8465bf 6986
c0065db7
RM
6987@item using a DEF file
6988@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6989Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6990an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6991exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6992name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6993command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6994
6995@example
6996gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6997@end example
6998
0a5d968e
NC
6999Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7000@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7001
dc8465bf
NC
7002Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7003
7004@example
4b5bd4e7 7005LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7006
7007EXPORTS
7008foo
7009bar
7010_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7011another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7012var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7013doo = foo == foo2
7014eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7015@end example
dc8465bf 7016
7fcab871 7017This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7018symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7019alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7020by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7021@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7022@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7023export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7024in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7025symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7026
6b31ad16
DS
7027The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7028name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7029the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7030
b45619c0
NC
7031When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7032library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7033@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7034executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7035
7036With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7037specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7038non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7039
7040If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7041or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7042filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7043
4b5bd4e7
DS
7044The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7045
7046@example
7047EXPORTS
7048 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7049 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7050 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7051@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7052
7053Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7054@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7055@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7056@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7057Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7058@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7059string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7060
7061The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7062
7063@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7064will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7065by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7066linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7067library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7068
7069@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7070The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7071the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7072@code{*_imp__foo}).
7073
7074@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7075well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7076read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7077variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7078the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7079extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7080application will behave unexpectedly.
7081
7082@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7083it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7084symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7085API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7086the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7087
4b5bd4e7
DS
7088See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7089other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7090
7091@cindex creating a DEF file
7092While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7093with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7094
7095@item Using decorations
7096@cindex Using decorations
7097Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7098itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7099declared as:
7100
7101@example
7102__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7103__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7104@end example
7105
7106All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7107any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7108this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7109the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7110
7111Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7112decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7113instead:
7114
7115@example
7116__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7117__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7118@end example
7119
c0065db7
RM
7120This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7121when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7122variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7123code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7124of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7125omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7126@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7127information.
c0065db7 7128@end table
dc8465bf 7129
2ca22b03
NC
7130@cindex automatic data imports
7131@item automatic data imports
7132The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7133by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7134compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7135issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7136code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7137c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7138initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7139decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7140platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7141command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7142The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7143suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7144trigger the feature's use.
7145
c0065db7 7146auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7147additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7148
c0065db7 7149"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7150documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7151
c0065db7
RM
7152The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7153occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7154One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7155below.
7156
7157@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7158For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7159object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7160offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7161field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7162in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7163without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7164The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7165references.
7166
c0065db7
RM
7167The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7168be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7169themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7170runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7171compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7172support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7173run without error on an older system.
7174
c0065db7
RM
7175@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7176enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7177
7178@cindex direct linking to a dll
7179@item direct linking to a dll
7180The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7181including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7182libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7183traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7184libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7185function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7186though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7187storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7188tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7189large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7190
c0065db7 7191Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7192@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7193of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7194perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7195select the dll instead of an import library.
7196
2ca22b03 7197
69da35b5
NC
7198For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7199to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7200
7201@example
45e948fe
NC
7202libxxx.dll.a
7203xxx.dll.a
7204libxxx.a
7205xxx.lib
69da35b5 7206cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7207libxxx.dll
7208xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7209@end example
7210
69da35b5
NC
7211before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7212
c0065db7
RM
7213(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7214where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7215@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7216file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7217@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7218
c0065db7
RM
7219Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7220@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7221was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7222various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7223could coexist on the same machine.
7224
2ca22b03
NC
7225The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7226applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7227libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7228
7229@example
7230bin/
7231 cygxxx.dll
7232lib/
7233 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7234 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7235@end example
7236
c0065db7
RM
7237Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7238done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7239
72401. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7241@example
7242gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7243@end example
2ca22b03 7244
69da35b5
NC
7245However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7246(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7247@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7248not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7249
2ca22b03
NC
72502. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7251directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7252should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7253making the app/dll.
7254
7255@example
7256ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7257@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7258
7259Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7260
7261@example
7262gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7263@end example
69da35b5
NC
7264
7265This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7266perfectly legal
7267
7268@example
7269bin/
7270 cygxxx-5.dll
7271lib/
c0065db7 7272 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7273@end example
7274
dc8465bf 7275Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7276even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7277@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7278
7279Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7280wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7281
72821. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7283work with auto-imported data.
7284
dc8465bf
NC
72852. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7286import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7287symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7288for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7289possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7290
45e948fe
NC
72913. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7292critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7293in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7294stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7295
69da35b5 7296So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7297true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7298a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7299binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7300massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7301requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7302will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7303
c0065db7 7304@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7305@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7306@item adding additional names
7307Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7308A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7309exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7310when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7311import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7312
c0065db7 7313@example
dc8465bf
NC
7314LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7315
7316EXPORTS
c0065db7 7317foo
dc8465bf 7318_foo = foo
c0065db7 7319@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7320
7321The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7322
7323Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7324source code using the "weak" attribute:
7325
c0065db7
RM
7326@example
7327void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7328void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7329@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7330
7331See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7332symbols.
7333
7334@item renaming symbols
7335Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7336kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7337@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7338DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7339created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7340
c0065db7 7341@example
dc8465bf
NC
7342LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7343
7344EXPORTS
7345_foo = foo
c0065db7 7346@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7347
7348The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7349@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7350@end table
dc8465bf 7351
0a5d968e 7352Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7353unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7354If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7355@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7356that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7357@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7358renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7359to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7360the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7361In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7362which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7363
7364@cindex weak externals
7365@item weak externals
7366The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7367weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7368defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7369are three variants of weak externals:
7370@itemize
7371@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7372called lazy externals.
7373@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7374This form is not presently implemented.
7375@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7376implemented.
7377@end itemize
7378As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7379are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7380uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7381
7382@cindex aligned common symbols
7383@item aligned common symbols
7384As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7385desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7386the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7387carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7388by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7389tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7390but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7391warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7392@end table
7393
7394@ifclear GENERIC
7395@lowersections
7396@end ifclear
7397@end ifset
7398
e0001a05
NC
7399@ifset XTENSA
7400@ifclear GENERIC
7401@raisesections
7402@end ifclear
7403
7404@node Xtensa
7405@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7406
7407@cindex Xtensa processors
7408The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7409@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7410specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7411keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7412example, with the command:
7413
7414@smallexample
7415SECTIONS
7416@{
7417 .text : @{
7418 *(.literal .text)
7419 @}
7420@}
7421@end smallexample
7422
7423@noindent
7424@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7425and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7426literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7427interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7428group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7429files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7430and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7431
43cd72b9 7432@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7433@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7434Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7435provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7436is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7437literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7438will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7439location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7440the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7441unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7442@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7443range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7444
7445For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7446to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7447instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7448instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7449instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7450@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7451hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7452By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7453switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7454density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7455instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7456performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7457linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7458a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7459
7460The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7461control the linker:
7462
7463@cindex Xtensa options
7464@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7465@item --size-opt
7466When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7467more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7468no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7469alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7470preserve the correctness of the code.
7471@end table
e0001a05
NC
7472
7473@ifclear GENERIC
7474@lowersections
7475@end ifclear
7476@end ifset
7477
252b5132
RH
7478@ifclear SingleFormat
7479@node BFD
7480@chapter BFD
7481
7482@cindex back end
7483@cindex object file management
7484@cindex object formats available
7485@kindex objdump -i
7486The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7487These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7488object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7489format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7490it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7491associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7492object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7493(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7494list all the formats available for your configuration.
7495
7496@cindex BFD requirements
7497@cindex requirements for BFD
7498As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7499several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7500BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7501formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7502been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7503BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7504may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7505
7506One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7507mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7508useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7509conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7510
7511@menu
7512* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7513@end menu
7514
7515@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7516@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7517@cindex opening object files
7518@include bfdsumm.texi
7519@end ifclear
7520
7521@node Reporting Bugs
7522@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7523@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7524@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7525
ff5dcc92 7526Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7527
7528Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7529it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7530to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7531work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7532@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7533
7534In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7535information that enables us to fix the bug.
7536
7537@menu
7538* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7539* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7540@end menu
7541
7542@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7543@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7544@cindex bug criteria
7545
7546If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7547
7548@itemize @bullet
7549@cindex fatal signal
7550@cindex linker crash
7551@cindex crash of linker
7552@item
7553If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7554@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7555
7556@cindex error on valid input
7557@item
ff5dcc92 7558If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7559
7560@cindex invalid input
7561@item
ff5dcc92 7562If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7563may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7564object files are correct.
7565
7566@item
7567If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7568improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7569@end itemize
7570
7571@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7572@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7573@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7574@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7575
7576A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7577products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7578recommend you contact that organization first.
7579
7580You can find contact information for many support companies and
7581individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7582distribution.
7583
ad22bfe8 7584@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7585Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7586@value{BUGURL}.
7587@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7588
7589The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7590@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7591fact or leave it out, state it!
7592
7593Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7594problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7595assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7596matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7597the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7598location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7599were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7600into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7601specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7602and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7603
7604Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7605the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7606on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7607
7608Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7609bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7610respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7611You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7612
7613To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7614
7615@itemize @bullet
7616@item
ff5dcc92 7617The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7618the @samp{--version} argument.
7619
7620Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7621the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7622
7623@item
ff5dcc92 7624Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7625patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7626
7627@item
7628The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7629version number.
7630
7631@item
ff5dcc92 7632What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7633``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7634
7635@item
7636The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7637observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7638list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7639sufficient.
7640
7641If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7642and then we might not encounter the bug.
7643
7644@item
7645A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7646bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7647provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7648bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7649state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7650requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7651we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7652attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7653
7654If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7655@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7656object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7657@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7658how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7659
7660@item
7661A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7662incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7663
ff5dcc92 7664Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7665will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7666not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7667a chance to make a mistake.
7668
7669Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7670say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7671copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7672C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7673and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7674fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7675you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7676any conclusion from our observations.
7677
7678@item
ff5dcc92 7679If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7680diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7681@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7682If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7683context, not by line number.
7684
7685The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7686sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7687@end itemize
7688
7689Here are some things that are not necessary:
7690
7691@itemize @bullet
7692@item
7693A description of the envelope of the bug.
7694
7695Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7696which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7697changes will not affect it.
7698
7699This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7700will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7701with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7702We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7703
7704Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7705of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7706output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7707less time, and so on.
7708
7709However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7710report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7711
7712@item
7713A patch for the bug.
7714
7715A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7716the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7717a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7718to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7719
ff5dcc92 7720Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7721construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7722through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7723able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7724fixed.
7725
7726And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7727patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7728help us to understand.
7729
7730@item
7731A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7732
7733Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7734things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7735@end itemize
7736
7737@node MRI
7738@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7739@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7740To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7741linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7742alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7743described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7744simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7745@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7746linker commands; these commands are described here.
7747
7748In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7749file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7750features to make use of them.
7751
7752You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7753@samp{-c} command-line option.
7754
7755Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7756command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7757blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7758MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7759issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7760
7761Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7762
7763You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7764lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7765The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7766
7767@table @code
7768@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7769@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7770@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7771Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7772the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7773@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7774your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7775script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7776commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7777input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7778@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7779
7780@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7781@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7782Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7783in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7784
7785@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7786
7787@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7788@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7789Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7790@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7791
7792@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7793@item BASE @var{expression}
7794Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7795absolute addresses) in the output file.
7796
7797@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7798@item CHIP @var{expression}
7799@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7800This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7801
7802@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7803@item END
7804This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7805
7806@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7807@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7808Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7809language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7810
7811@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7812@item
252b5132
RH
7813S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7814
7815@item
7816IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7817
7818@item
7819COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7820@samp{COFF}
7821@end enumerate
7822
7823@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7824@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7825Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7826@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7827
7828The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7829same line, with no change in its effect.
7830
7831@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7832@item LOAD @var{filename}
7833@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7834Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7835same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7836command line.
7837
7838@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7839@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7840@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7841MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7842option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7843
7844@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7845@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7846@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7847Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7848order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7849script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7850sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7851file, in the order specified.
7852
7853@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7854@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7855@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7856@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7857Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7858@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7859
7860@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7861@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7862@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7863@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7864You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7865specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7866If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7867@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7868@end table
7869
793c5807
NC
7870@node GNU Free Documentation License
7871@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7872@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7873
370b66a1
CD
7874@node LD Index
7875@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7876
7877@printindex cp
7878
7879@tex
7880% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7881% meantime:
7882\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7883\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7884\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7885\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7886\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7887\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7888\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7889\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7890\page\colophon
7891% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7892@end tex
7893
252b5132 7894@bye
This page took 1.218121 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.